‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ )‪(4‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻭ‪...‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎً ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -7‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺴﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪101‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻰ ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ )ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ( ﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺯﻭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻀﺎ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻨﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻼگ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ‬

‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺍﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 4-1‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ‪: 1‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻭﻳﺰﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻯ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻪ ﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- RESERVIORS‬‬

‫‪102‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬

‫ﻼ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻯ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 4-1-1‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﻛﺶ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻳﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﻭﻋﻨﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﭘﻼﻙ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻋﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-1‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬

‫)‪(1‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺸﻘﺎﺑﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻯ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻠﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪103‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺛﺮﺗﺨﺮﻳﺒﻰ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ )ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻋﺮﻕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻰ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ × 2‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ‪ =gpm‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺪﺍﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺟﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 4-1-2‬ﻣﻮﺝ ﮔﻴﺮ‪: 2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(4-2‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎً ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺝ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ – (1‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻼﻃﻢ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ – (2‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻪ ﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ – (3‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻯ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ – (4‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻏﺘﺸﺎﺵ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺝﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺝﮔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻮﺍﺯﺩﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-4-2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﻣﻮﺝﮔﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫‪2- Bae . Plate‬‬

‫‪104‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -4-2‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓـــﻰ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ـ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﻙ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻰ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻫﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(4-3‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-3‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ـ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻰ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻯ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻯ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﺳﻴﻤﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺏ – ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻨﺮ‪ 4‬ﻣﻰﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3- Coarse‬‬
‫‪4- Strainer‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 4-2-1‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﺳﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻳﺰﻯ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣِﺶ‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﺳﻴﻮ‪ 6‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ﻣﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﺭﻳﺰﺗﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻐﺰﻯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩﻯ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﺳﻴﻤﻰ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 70‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻭﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺫﺭﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 40‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪،(4-4‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺶ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﻮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺭﺍﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4-2-2‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ـ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(4-5‬‬

‫‪5- Mesh‬‬
‫‪6- Sieve‬‬

‫‪106‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻨﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-4‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ‪ 39‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪107‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ)ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻱ ﭘﺲ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ(ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻱ ﭘﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻭﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻱ ﭘﺲ ﻛﺎﻣ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺠ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬ ‫ﻮ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-4-5‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(4-6‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ )ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ( ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً‬

‫ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﺳﻴﻤﻰ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺶ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 149‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ( ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻬﺎﻯ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 150‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-6‬ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﻳﺰ‬

‫ﺏ ـ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ـ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (4-7‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻧﺪ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ )ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺟﺬﺏ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﺘﻠﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪109‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ﺑﻪﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-4-7‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺩـ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ـ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻧﺪ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (4-8‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻰ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﻪ ﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪،‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻇﺮﺍﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻳﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪110‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-8‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪-4-2-3‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ـ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ـ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻰ‪: 7‬‬

‫ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻯ‬

‫ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺏ ـ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺬﺑﻰ ‪: 8‬‬

‫ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻳﺎ‪،‬‬

‫ﺧﻤﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﺰﻯ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺦ ﺑﺎﻓﻨﺪﮔﻰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‪ .....‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7-Mechanical‬‬
‫‪8- Absorbent‬‬

‫‪111‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪: 9‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻏﺎﻝ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﻰ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺭﺱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ -4-2-4‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ـ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ـ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻰ‪: 10‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻰ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(4-9‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻇﺮﺍﻓﺘﻰ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺑﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺱ‬

‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-4-9‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬

‫‪9-Active‬‬
‫‪10- Surface Type‬‬
‫‪112‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻘﻰ‪: 11‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﭘﻴﭽﺎﭘﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(4-10‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻻً ﺩﺑﻰ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-10‬ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍﻯ‪: 12‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(4-11‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﺎﺭﻭﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻰﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ‬

‫ﺟﺎﺭﻭﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪11- Depth Type‬‬

‫‪12- Edge Type‬‬

‫‪113‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻙﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻴﻐﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻙﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺴﻚﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-11‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﺒﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺯﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‬

‫‪ 4-2-5‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪: 13‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(4-12‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻱﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-12‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪13- Full - Flow Filters‬‬

‫‪114‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻯ ﭘﺲ )ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺭ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪: 14‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺭﻯ ﻫﻤــﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺸﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﺯﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﻧﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺎً ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻜﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﺞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-13‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪14- Proportional - Flow Filters‬‬

‫‪115‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻤﺘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﭙﻮﺭﻩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺭﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻠﻮﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ‬

‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ )ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺳﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ( ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬

‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻠﻮﮔﺎﻩ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(4‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻴﭙﻮﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺭﻯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﭘﻤﭗ‪) ،‬ﻻﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ‪: 15‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮﻯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(4-14‬‬

‫ﻛﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-14‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪15- Indicator Type Filter‬‬

‫‪116‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﺸﺎﻥ‬

‫)ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻰ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪-4-2-6‬ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪: 16‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻬﺮﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻰﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻰ‪: 17‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(4-15‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ )ﻓﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺁﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻰ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪16َ-Heat Exchanger‬‬
‫‪17- Air Coolers‬‬
‫‪117‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻦ ﻛﻤﻜﻰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻯ‬

‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-15‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺩﺑﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺑﻰ‪: 18‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(4-16‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺑﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﮔﻼﺗﻮﺭ‪ -‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪18- Water Coolers‬‬

‫‪118‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺁﺏ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -4-16‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﺍﻱ‪ -‬ﻭﺭﻗﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ )‪( 4‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ً ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪120‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬

‫‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻰ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻛﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪121‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ )‪(5‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ ؟‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ )ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ( ﻣﻰ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‬

‫‪122‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪:1‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﻰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 5-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺮژﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻰ‪ 3‬ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺧﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬

‫ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻰﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻝﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ‬

‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻛﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺫ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ ء ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- Hydraulic Actuator‬‬
‫‪2َ-Pressure Energy‬‬
‫‪3- Mechanical Force‬‬
‫‪4-Motion‬‬

‫‪123‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 5-2‬ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪: 5‬‬

‫ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻰ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺮژﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉﺍﻱ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-3‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻯ‬

‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-3-1‬ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ‪: 6‬‬

‫ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺒﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺯﭘﻤﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-1‬ﺟﻚ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ‬

‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻚ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5- Cylinder‬‬
‫‪6َ-Ram Type Cylinder‬‬

‫‪124‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ‪7‬ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﻮﺑﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺭژﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 5-3-2‬ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺗﻠﺴﻜﻮﭘﻰ‪: 8‬‬

‫ـ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻚ ﻳﻚﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬

‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺟﻚ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ـ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺵﻛﺸﻮﺋﻰ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺭﻭ‪ ،9‬ﻫﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬

‫)‪(5 -2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪2‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-2‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﺴﻜﻮﭘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﺴﻜﻮﭘﻰ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻚ‬

‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﺴﻜﻮﭘﻰ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5-3-3‬ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪: 10‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫‪7- Strokes 8- Telescoping Cylinders 9َ-Sleeve‬‬

‫‪10- Standard Double - Acting Cylinder‬‬

‫‪125‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5-3‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-3‬ﺟﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ )ﻗﺪﺭﺕ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺮﻩ ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻯ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-3-4‬ﺟﻚ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ – ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ‪: 11‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺮﻩ ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺳﻄﺤﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻚﻫﺎ ﻣﻰﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5-4‬‬

‫‪11-Double Rod cylinder‬‬

‫‪126‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-4‬ﺟﻚ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻚ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-4‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪: 12‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺳﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﺑﻨﺪﻯ ؛‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺷﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻧﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﻮﺍﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﺮﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ -5-5‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫‪12-Cylinder Construction‬‬
‫‪127‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭼﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻯ‬

‫ﻭ ﺻﻴﻘﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﺳﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻯ ﻧﺸﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻰ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﻮﺑﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﺏ‬

‫ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ T‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪O‬ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﻮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ‪O‬ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺵﻫﺎﻯﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-5‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻚ‪: 13‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺟﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5-6‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺯﻭﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪U‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ‬

‫‪ - 5-6‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 15‬ﺟﻚﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻚ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻯ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺟﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪13- Cylinder Mountings‬‬ ‫‪14- Clevis‬‬ ‫‪15-Cylinder Ratings‬‬

‫‪128‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻼﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﭻﺧﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-6‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻚ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻚﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭ ﺁﻟﻴﺎژ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ، 16‬ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ 17‬ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩﻭﺍﻡ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﻚ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭼﻚ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻞ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (5-1‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻯ ‪،500‬‬
‫‪ 1500 ،1000‬ﻭ ‪PSI 2000‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻰ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪16 Standard‬‬ ‫‪17-Intermediate‬‬ ‫‪18-Heavy Duty‬‬

‫‪129‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪Full Bore‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪Cylinder Bore‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻄﺮﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺟﻚ‬

‫‪Annulus‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪Rod O.D‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫‪Rod‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫‪Push‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪INT.NED‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫‪Pull‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪HVY‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩﻭﺍﻡ‬

‫‪Piston Area‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(5-1‬‬

‫‪130‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 5-7‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻚ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺑﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻚ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ÷ ﺩﺑﻰ = ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫‪ cm ‬‬ ‫‪ cm 3 ‬‬

‫‪ sec ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪cm 2 ‬‬
‫‪ sec ‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(1‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻚ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻚ‬

‫ـ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ × ﻓﺸﺎﺭ = ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬

‫] ‪[N‬‬ ‫‪ N ‬‬

‫‪ cm 2 ‬‬
‫‪cm 2 ‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺋﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻚ‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺭﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪131‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ÷ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ = ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫‪ N ‬‬
‫‪ cm 2 ‬‬ ‫] ‪[N‬‬ ‫‪cm 2 ‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (5 -2‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺑﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻲﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺟﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻪﻓﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬

‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(5-2‬‬

‫‪19-Work Load‬‬

‫‪132‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪- 5-8‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻰ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺪﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺑﻮﺵ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺑﻮﺷﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-8-1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖﮔﻴﺮ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﻚﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ‪....‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻚﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﭘﻼﻧﭽﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻨﺪﺷﺪﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺲﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-7‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ‬

‫‪20-Cylinder Cushions‬‬
‫‪133‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻯ ﻃﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻱﭘﺲﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺲ ﺩﺍﺭ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-8-2‬ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪: 21‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﻚﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻃﻮﻳﻠﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﻟﻰ‬

‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5-8‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ 10‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻚ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ‪ 150‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻚ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ 10‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ‪50‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺬ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻚ‬

‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-8‬ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺟﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪21-Stop Tubes‬‬

‫‪134‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺗﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺟﻚ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻰ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺑﺮﺷﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪ :‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺟﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-9‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺮژﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪) ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻫﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-10‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5-10-1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻰﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺩﺟﺎﻯ ﻣﻰﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻃﺎﻗﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻤﭙﺎژ ‪ x‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻃﺎﻗﻚ ﭘﻤﭙﺎژ = ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺧ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻦ ﺎ ﺍ ﻜ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-9‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻰ ) ﻳﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ( ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪135‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞﺿﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻃﺎﻗﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻃﺎﻗﻚ‬

‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ ، cm‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪، in‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫‪REV .‬‬ ‫‪REV .‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﻰﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪REV .‬‬

‫‪ - 5-10-2‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻰ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‪: 22‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﻙ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ )ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻰ‬

‫ﺳﻜﻮﻥ( ﺑﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(5 -10‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ= ‪IN.lB15‬‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ= ‪IN.lB25‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-10‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫‪22-Torque‬‬

‫‪136‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺿﻤﻨﺎً‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﻌﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻭ ﺗﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ )ﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬

‫‪ 5-10-3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 5-10 -4‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺮ ‪psi‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 23‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ‬

‫‪ 100‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪L b − in‬‬
‫‪100Psi‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺍژﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪23-Size‬‬
‫‪24- Torque Rating‬‬

‫‪137‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 5 -11‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ × 0/01‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ( ÷ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ= ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫‪L b − in‬‬
‫‪100Psi‬‬ ‫‪L b − in‬‬ ‫‪PSi‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ -(1‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ‪ 500‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ – ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ 2000 psi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ‪ 25‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪500‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫= ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪= 25‬‬
‫‪2000×0/01‬‬ ‫‪100PSi‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺮ ‪ 100 psi‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺁﻥ ‪25‬‬

‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )‪ -(2‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ‪50‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ‪ 1500‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ 3000 psi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪1500‬‬
‫= ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪=3000 PSi‬‬
‫‪50×0/01‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻰﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ÷100‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ×ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ= ﻣﺎﮔﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‬

‫‪L b − in‬‬
‫‪L b − in‬‬ ‫‪PSi‬‬
‫‪100Psi‬‬

‫‪138‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ ‪ 10‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ‪psi‬‬

‫‪ ،2500‬ﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ‪ 250‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪10× 2500‬‬
‫= ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪= 250‬‬ ‫‪Lb − in‬‬
‫‪100‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ : (2‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍژﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ≡ 231in 3‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ≡ ‪gal‬‬

‫‪Lb‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫≡ ‪PSi ≡ 2‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ≡‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪in‬‬
‫‪gαl.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ‬
‫≡ ‪gρm‬‬ ‫≡‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ≡‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪min .‬‬
‫‪Re v.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫≡ ‪rρm‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ≡ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ≡‬
‫‪min .‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ‪ ≡ 360° ≡ 2π‬ﺩﻭﺭ ≡ ‪Re v.‬‬
‫≡ ‪l ≡ lit‬‬ ‫‪ = 103 cm 3‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪÷2π‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ× ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻲ= ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫‪in 3‬‬
‫‪L b − in‬‬ ‫‪PSi‬‬ ‫‪REV .‬‬

‫‪139‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺑﻰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ×ﺩﻭﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ=ﺩﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫‪cm 3‬‬ ‫‪cm 3‬‬

‫‪min‬‬ ‫‪RPM‬‬ ‫‪Rev .‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ‬

‫‪ rpm1000‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ‪ 43 gpm‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 1 =231 in 3‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪1000×10‬‬
‫= ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪=43/2 gpm‬‬
‫‪231‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺑﻰ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪gpm‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺑﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫‪140‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ÷ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻲ= ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫‪RPM‬‬ ‫‪cm 3‬‬ ‫‪cm 3‬‬

‫‪min‬‬ ‫‪Rev .‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 5 -12‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(5-11‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﻲ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-11‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻜﻴﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪25-Gear Motors‬‬

‫‪141‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻰ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪ 180‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪ 180‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺷﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ،psi2500‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻰ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ‪،‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5 -13‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ‪:26‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(5-12‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪26-Vane Motors‬‬

‫‪142‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻩ‪،‬‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ - A‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺶﻣ‬
‫ﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺭ ﻛﻢ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧ‬
‫ﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺟ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻻﻳﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ :B‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-12‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭼﺎﻙﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(3‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻰ‪ 27‬ﻣﻰﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪27-Cam Ring‬‬

‫‪143‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬

‫ﺁﺏﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺘﺮﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪ 180°‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻰﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ّ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ B‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(5 -12‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5 -13‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻰﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ 28‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎﺋﻰ‪ 29‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻻ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻰ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦﺍﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪28- Pressure Plate‬‬

‫‪29- Rocker Arm‬‬

‫‪144‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻟﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻞ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺏﭘﻮﺵ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-13‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ) ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﻮﺵ ( ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(5 -14‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻯ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ)ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬

‫‪145‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻯ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎً ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ‪...‬‬

‫‪-1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻚﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ‪20psi‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-14‬ﺩﺭﻃﺮﺡ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫)‪(8‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻚ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5 -15‬‬

‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-15‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪146‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5 -16‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﭘﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻚﻃﺮﻓﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-16‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬

‫‪ - 5 -14‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ‪: 30‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ – (5-17‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯﭘﺮﻩﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻰﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻪﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-17‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪30-High Performance Vane‬‬

‫‪147‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5 -13‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻯ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﭘﻬﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ )ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﭻ (‪ 31‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(5 -18‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-18‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫‪31- Cartridge‬‬

‫‪148‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺗﺮﻳﺞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻰﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(5 -19‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-19‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪،‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5 -15‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪:32‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ ،(5 -20‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﻯ ‪MHT‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪32-High Torque Motor‬‬

‫‪149‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-20‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ )ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ( ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﻰﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ RPM 150‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 4500‬ﻓﻮﺕ‪ -‬ﭘﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﺑﻠﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 9000‬ﻓﻮﺕ – ﭘﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺁﻻﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻯ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻯ‬

‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﭙﺮﻫﺎ‪ّ ،‬ﺟﺮﺍﺛﻘﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪150‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 5 -16‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪: 33‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻯ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻔﺸﻚﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫‪(5‬‬ ‫)‪-21‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭﻣﻴﺂﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻞ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-5-21‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻯ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪33-Inline Piston Motors‬‬

‫‪151‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5 -22‬‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻚﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻔﺸﻚﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩ ّﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻍ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-22‬ﺩﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫‪34- Swash Plate‬‬

‫‪152‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5-23‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-23‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻮﻍ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﺎﻯ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻰ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻭﻫﺎ‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬

‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (8‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5 -17‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ -‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪.(5 -24‬‬

‫‪35-Hand Wheel‬‬
‫‪36- Servo‬‬
‫‪153‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻫﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-24‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ -‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪30‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻰﺭﺳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪154‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪7/5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻰﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻭ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(5-25‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(5-26‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-25‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻍ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -5-26‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬

‫‪155‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 5-18‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﺋﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻯ‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ‬

‫ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 5-19‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺑﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ‪RPM‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪Psi‬‬ ‫‪gpm‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺥ‬ ‫‪2500‬‬ ‫‪150‬‬ ‫‪7000‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ‬ ‫‪2500‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬ ‫‪4000‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪5000‬‬ ‫‪450‬‬ ‫‪12000‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫‪156‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ )‪(5‬‬

‫‪-1‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪-2‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟‬

‫‪-3‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪-4‬ﺟﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪-5‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﻚ‬

‫ﺏ – ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻚ‬

‫ﺝ – ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺋﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻚ‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ ؟ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ؟ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪ -10‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻰ )ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺏ – ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺩ – ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺑﻰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺡ – ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ؟‬

‫‪157‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -11‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ؟‬

‫‪ -12‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺩﺭﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -13‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -14‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 6‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺩﺭﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ– ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -15‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻰ ﺩﺭﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ – ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ 3 -16‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -17‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪158‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻛﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫•ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‪،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻧﻘﺶ ّ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‪:‬‬

‫‪-‬ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪:‬‬

‫‪159‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ)‪(6‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪-4‬ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ‪،‬ﭼﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -6‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻣﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪160‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ »ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ« ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ » ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ« ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪-‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(1‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(3‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ‪:‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪)،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ( ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺶ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً‪،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ – 6‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪: 1‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪،‬ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(1‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪١- Directional Control Valves‬‬

‫‪161‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪(1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﺊ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‪) 2‬ﺳﻮﭘﺎﭘﻲ(‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﺊ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﺊ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﺊ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﻩ( ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﺊ ﺑﺎ ﺍِﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻜﻲ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫)‪(2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻼﻧﺠﺮﻱ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢-Poppet‬‬
‫‪٣- Piston‬‬
‫‪٤-Ball‬‬
‫‪٥- Rotory‬‬
‫‪٦- Sliding‬‬
‫‪٧-Cam‬‬
‫‪٨- Plunger‬‬
‫‪٩- Electrical Solenoid‬‬
‫‪١٠- Piolot Operated‬‬

‫‪162‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ» ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ« ﻟﻮﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ّ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺯﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻠّﺖ ّ‬

‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ّ -6-1‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ» ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ «11‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﻮﻳﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻣ ّﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6-2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‪:12‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-1‬‬

‫‪11-Finite Positioning‬‬
‫‪12-Chech Valves‬‬

‫‪163‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻘﺮﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-1‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ‪،‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺭﻭ ﺑﻨﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ» ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻭﻣﻘﺮ‪ «13‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺩﺍﺭ‪) 14‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺲ(‬

‫‪15‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ(‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪13-Ball And Seat‬‬

‫‪14- Restriction Check Valve‬‬
‫‪15- Pilot Operated Check Valve‬‬

‫‪164‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -6-2-1‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:16‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (6-2‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ -6-2‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ » ﺳﻴﺖ « ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‬

‫)ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪.(6-3‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬

‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ -6-3‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫‪16-Inline Check Valve‬‬

‫‪165‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺷﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 5 psi‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴــﺪ » ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ« ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻱﭘﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ » ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ«‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻱ ﭘﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ » ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ«‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﭼﻨﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ‪،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ« ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‪،‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ« ﻳﺎ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ« ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛــﺮﺩ )ﺭﻭﻏﻦ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄــﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻬﺪﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 3000 psi‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-2-2‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪:17‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (6-4‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ -6-4‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬

‫ﻗﺎ ﺋﻤﻪﺍﻱ‬

‫‪17-Right Angle Check Valve‬‬

‫‪166‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺨﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬

‫ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪.(6-5‬‬

‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-5‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﻪﺍﻱ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 320 gpm‬ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣــﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻨــﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧــﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻨــﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳــﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ّ‬
‫»ﺷﻴــﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ«‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘــﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑــﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻴــﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮔــﺮﻭﻩ‬

‫» ﺷﻴﺮﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ«‪ ،‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6-2-2‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺩﺍﺭ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (6-6‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-6‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪﺗﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ »ﺩﺭﺏ ﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺩﺍﺭ« ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬

‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﻙﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬

‫‪ -6-2-4‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪:‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ‪،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ّ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ‬

‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ )ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-7‬‬

‫‪،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ »‪ » 4C‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪168‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻠﻴﻮ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ )ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-7‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪4C‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻪﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﺖ )ﻣﻘّﺮ( ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺳﻴﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ«ﺍﺳﻠﻴﻮ‪ «19‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻠﻴﻮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ« ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ) ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺏ ﭘﻮﺵ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ‪،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪19-Sleeve‬‬

‫‪169‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿّ ﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ّ‬

‫ﻣﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ)‪، (6-8‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪OUT‬‬

‫‪IN‬‬ ‫‪IN‬‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻰ‬

‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-8‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪4C‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪، B,A‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ » ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ«‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ، A‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪،‬ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿّ ﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ، B‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻨﺮ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ، C‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ«‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪،‬‬

‫‪170‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،4c‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ٪40‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 6-3‬ﻛ ّﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ‪،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (6-9‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‪، P‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ A‬ﻳﺎ‪ B‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ T‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫‪ A‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬
‫‪ P‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-9‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬

‫‪171‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ T‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ T‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(3‬ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ » ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ« ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻴﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ)ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ(ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺩﺍﻣﻚ ‪،‬ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-3-1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪:20‬‬

‫‪-‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ ،(6-10‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﻭﺭ ‪،‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ«ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ «21‬ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻚﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ«‬
‫‪20-Rotory Four-Way Valve‬‬
‫‪21- Flow Path‬‬

‫‪172‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻐﺰﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮ‬ ‫‪A‬‬

‫ﺑﺑﻪ ﭘﻤ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺑﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪ A‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪B‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠﺮﺍﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-10‬ﺷﻴﺮﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬

‫‪ -6-3-2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪:22‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ)ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ( ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(6-11‬‬
‫ﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪B‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫‪A‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮ ﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ -6-11‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪22-Spool Type Two-way Valve‬‬

‫‪173‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣ ّﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﮔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬

‫ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪)،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻧﻪ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ(‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ‪،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ P‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ A‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ‪ P‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ B‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ‪،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-3-3‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪:23‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪، (6-12‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﻲ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪ B‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-12‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫‪23-Spool Typefour-Way Valve‬‬

‫‪174‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ( ‪،‬ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ‪ T‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‪،T‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-4‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ)ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ(‬

‫‪ -‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪، (6-1‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(2‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(4‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ‪.‬‬

‫‪175‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ :6-1‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻌﺎً ‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪.(6-11‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻌﺎً ‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(6-12‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(6-13‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ /‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-15‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻳﻞﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ‪)،‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪(6-16‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-17‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(6-12)+(6-11‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺟﻤﻌﺎً ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺉ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(6-21‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪Spring Oset. (6-14‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﺸﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ‪،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ(‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-22‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﻤﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ )ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ( ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-13‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫)ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ّ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ‪ T,B,A,P‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ‪ T,A‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬ ‫• ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ‪ T,B,A,P‬ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﻧﺪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ‪ T,B,A‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺧﻼﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ,T,A,P‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬ ‫• ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎﻱ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ T‬ﺑﻬﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (6-2‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﺪﻡ‬ ‫•ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬

‫‪176‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -6-5‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ‪،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(6-14) ،(6-13‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ )‪6-13‬‬

‫‪ T‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪B‬‬

‫‪ P‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ‪A‬‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪A‬‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ‪B‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-13‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻰ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-14‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻰ‬

‫‪177‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ‬

‫‪ .(6‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪.(6-15‬‬
‫ﻞ )‪15‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺨ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪....‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ )ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ(‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪....‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻋﻜﺲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬

‫ﻝ‪ ،‬ﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻝﺷ‬‫‪ -6‬ﺍﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ -6-15‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﺳﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬

‫‪178‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ« ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ« ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻛﻮﭼﻚ؛ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(6-16‬‬

‫ﻣﻰﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎﻳﻰ‪....‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻭ ‪....‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-16‬ﻛﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ‪،‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪،‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ)‪ (6-17‬ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(6-18‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ‪....‬‬

‫ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-17‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻯ ‪ -‬ﺟﻰ ‪ 5 -‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪179‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮ‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ (‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-18‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻰ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻯ‪-‬ﺟﻰ‪ 5-‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ - 6-6‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺁﻓﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ؛ ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻨﺮ ‪،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(6-19‬‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-19‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫‪180‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪(2‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻛﻠّﻴﻪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪-‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(6-20‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-20‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬

‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫‪181‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﮕﻲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ‪،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﭘﻨﻴﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-7‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻃ ّﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ »ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ« ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ‪،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ّ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ »ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ« ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ‪،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ »ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ« ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (6-21‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬

‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪182‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ )ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺍﻧﺪ(‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻭ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ )ﺗﻨﺪﻡ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-21‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺍﮔﺮﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺷﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ )ﺗﻨﺪﻡ( ّ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻚ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻲﺩﺭﭘﻲ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‬

‫‪183‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺿﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ »ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ« ‪،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (6-22‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻘﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘ‬
‫ﺪﺍ ﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -6-22‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻟﻬﺎ‬

‫‪184‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ) ‪( 6‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﺪﺍﻣﻨﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻋﻠّﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪-10‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -11‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ »ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ – ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻪ – ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ« ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ -12‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ّ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﻴﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬

‫‪ ،12‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪185‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻛﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬

‫ﻫﺪﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺟﻤﻊ‬

‫‪186‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ)‪(7‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪،‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -5‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪187‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪:1‬‬

‫‪- 7-1‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻣﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ« ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫‪ -7-2‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ »ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ« ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺘﺸﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪﺷﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ »ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ« ‪«،‬ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ« ‪«،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ« ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣ ّﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ‪ : 2‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ :3‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ« ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫﻪ« ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ »ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ » ﻭ ﻳﺎ »ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ » ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1-Pressure Control Valve‬‬

‫‪2- Pressure Relief Valve‬‬
‫‪3- Pressure Reducing Valve‬‬
‫‪188‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 7-3‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﺭﻓﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ » ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ« ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻜﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻًَ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)ﺍﻭﺭﻟﻮﺩ( ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ »ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻄﻲ« ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ »ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ« ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎً ‪،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍ ّﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻌﺮ )ﺳﻴﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ؛ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩ ّﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ »ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ« ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(7-1‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻛﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(7-1‬‬
‫‪189‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬

‫ﻧﺸﻴﻤﻨﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﺻﻮﻻً »ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ« ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ »ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ«‬

‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ )ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ(‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪190‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ - 7-3-1‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪) 4‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:( 5‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ، (7-2‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﻲ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )ﺍﺯﺳﻮﻱ ﭘﻤﭗ(‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-2‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻗﻮﻱ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺳﻴﺖ )ﻣﻘﻌﺮ( ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ّﺣﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ )ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ(‬
‫‪4-Simple Relief Valve‬‬
‫‪5- Direct Acting‬‬

‫‪191‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣ ّﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻨﺮﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ) ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺑﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪bar‬‬

‫‪ ، (2500 psi) 172‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ »ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ« ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ -7-3-2‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ،(7-3‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ« ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-3‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫‪6-Compound Relief Valve‬‬

‫‪192‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻭ ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍ ّﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﻱ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍ ّﻭﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ« ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ «7‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ« ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ« ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ »ﺳﻴﺖ« ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩ ّﻭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ« ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‪ » 8‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩ ّﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻃﺮﺯﻛﺎﺭ« ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪، (7-4‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ، A‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿ ّﻌﻴﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻢﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(4‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺑﻪ »ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ« ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪7-Meter - out Circuit‬‬
‫‪8-Bleed o . Circuit‬‬
‫‪193‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺮﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫‪ B‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﭙﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﭘﻴﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻨﺮﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﺭﻭ‬
‫ﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺭﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 20psi‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻴﺮﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ - A‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ - B‬ﺩﺭﺁﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ - C‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-4‬ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫‪194‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﻋﻤ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ« ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ«ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ‬

‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (6‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ »ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ« ﺑﺎﻻﻱ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« )ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ 20 psi‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ( ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪c‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ«ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺶ« ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ »ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ« ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪«،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪) ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ)‪(7-5‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ« ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻧﺖ‪ «9‬ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿ ّﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ« ‪،‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫»ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ »ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪9-Vent Connection‬‬

‫‪195‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭﺷﻜﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ‬

‫‪ 20Psi -2‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‪،‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-5‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ« ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ« ﺍﺯ ‪ psi20‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 7-4‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻴﭗ »‪« R‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺠﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻴﭗ »‪ » R‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(7-6‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﭗ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﭗ ‪ Rc‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-6‬ﺷﻴﺮﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻴﭗ‪ R‬ﻭ ﺗﻴﭗ ‪RC‬‬

‫‪196‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﻛﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ )ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﻳﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻴﭗ ﺷﻴﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 125 psi‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺷﻴﺮ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،125 psi‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻼﻧﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺰ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ 2000 psi‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪﺍﺵ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ 10‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‪ ،11‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫)‪ (7‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (8‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ‪ ، 12‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،13‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﺮﺑﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫‪10- Primary Circuit‬‬

‫‪11-Secondary Circuit‬‬
‫‪12- Relief Valve‬‬
‫‪13- Sequence Valve‬‬
‫‪14-Unlσading Valve‬‬

‫‪197‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫)‪ (9‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻴﭗ«‪ ، » R‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻴﭗ‬

‫‪ RC‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻌــﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‪ 15‬ﻭ » ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ «16‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (10‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﻴﭗ«‪ » R‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﭗ«‪ » RC‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7-4-1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺗﻴﭗ»‪:« R‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ، (7-7‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪A -‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ‪B -‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-7‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪R‬‬

‫‪15-Sequence Counter Balance Valve‬‬

‫‪16-Brake Valve‬‬

‫‪198‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻴﭗ«‪ ، » R‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ »ﺷﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻦ«‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ؛‬

‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ »ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ« ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻻﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ »ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ« ﺷﻴﺮ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ّ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (3‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ، A‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﺷﻴﺮﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (4‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ، B‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﭙﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7-5‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪:17‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ( ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣ ّﻌﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ( »ﺑﺎﺯ«‬

‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ّ‬
‫‪17- Pressure Reducing Valve‬‬
‫‪199‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ّ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ »ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ« ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ »ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻠﻮﺗﻲ« ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫)‪ (5‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌ ّﺎﻝ( ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻻﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7-5-1‬ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ، (7-8‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ A‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻓﻨﺮﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ B‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻻﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -7-8‬ﺷﻴﺮﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫‪200‬‬